Samsung | SAMSUNG PL10 | Samsung PL10 دليل المستخدم

‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪User Manual‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PL10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ—ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬ﻡ‪ ٣/‬ﻗﺪﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ—ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ—ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Samsung‬ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺎﺗﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻬﻢ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ً‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻐﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ١٠٤/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺜﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻨﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫● ﻓﺈﻥ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻛﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻭﺭﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪©2009 SAMSUNG DIGITAL IMAGING CO., LTD.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬
‫● ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Mac‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Corporation‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc.‬ﺗﻢ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WOW HD‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.SRS Labs, Inc.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ )ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ(‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‬
‫*‬
‫†‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ s‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ‪ DIS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Contrast Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Exposure Bracket‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪) Auto Focus‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪) Digital Image Stabilisation‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Digital Print Order Format‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪) Exposure Value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ(‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻲ‬
‫● ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫● ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫)ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ( ‪٤٥ e‬‬
‫● ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٤٩ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫● ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤٥ e‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ‪٤٦ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ‪٤٦ e‬‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٥٣ e‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ( ‪٥٣ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٥٤ e‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٥٦ e‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫● ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ‪٥٧ e‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ‪٥٨ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪٥٦ e‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺽﻉ ‪٣٧ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ ‪٣٤ e‬‬
‫● ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ )ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪٤٧ e‬‬
‫● ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪٥٤ e‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٢٣ e‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪٦١ e Smart Album‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٦٣ e‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪٦٥ e‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٧٢ e‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪٧٥ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪٨٥ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٥ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٥ e‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٨٦ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٨٦ e‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪٩٣ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.......................................................................... DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪.........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٠ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪١١ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٢ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٤ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪١٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٨ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢١ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٢ .................................... (Windows‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٢٢ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٢٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٤ ............................. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٦ ...................................................... Samsung Converter‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٧ ........................................................... Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪٢٩ ................................. (Mac‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٢٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٩ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ‪٣٠ ......................................‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤١ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪٤٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪٤٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٣ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ‪٤٥ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ‪r‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٤٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٤٦ ........................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٤٧ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٤٧ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٧ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٤٨ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٤٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪٤٩ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٥٠ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٠ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥١ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪٣٢ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣٣ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪٣٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪٣٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪................................................................ (EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪.......................................................... (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ‪...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٧٤ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٧٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪٧٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪٧٧ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ‪٨٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٨١ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪٨٣ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٨٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٨٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٥ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٨٥ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٨٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٨٨ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٨٩ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٨٩ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٠ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٩١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪٩٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٩٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٠٠ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٥٩ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٠ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٦٦ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٦٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦٩ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪٦٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪٧٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪٧١ ........................................................... (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٧٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪٧٣ ........................................ (PictBridge‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ……………………………………… ‪١١‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٢ ……… (Windows‬‬
‫……………………………………… ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ………………………………………… ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ……………………………………………… ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ………………………… ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ……………………………………… ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ……………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ …………………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ……………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٦ …………………… Samsung Converter‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٧ ………………………… Samsung Master‬‬
‫… ‪٢٤‬‬
‫………………… ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪٢٩ …… (Mac‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ………………………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ……………………………… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ………………………………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ……………………………………………… ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ………… ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ …………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫………………… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪A/V‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ‪ A/V‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪12‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫● ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪13‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪14‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ .[P‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [P‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [m‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )]‪.([t] ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [f‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ]‪ [M‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [t‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪17‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ً [D‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪1/2/3‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) s ،d ،S‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ( ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ v‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪21‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ‪CPU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪RAM‬‬
‫‪ Pentium III 500‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ‪ Pentium III 800‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Windows 2000 / XP / Vista‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫*‪ Samsung Converter‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫‪ 1024 × 768‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺖ )ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫‪ Microsoft Direct X 9.0C‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‬
‫**‪Xvid Codec‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Pentium IV‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫** ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ XviD‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ GNU‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫)‪(http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻤﻌﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻭ‪.Vista‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪22‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Samsung Digital Camera‬‬
‫‪ Installer‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Preview‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Do not install‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫‪.Next‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Install the codec program‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫‪ .Install‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Exit‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫œ ‪My Computer œ Removable Disk œ DCIM‬‬
‫‪.100SSCAM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬
‫● ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Layer 3) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫● ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ٣٢٠ - ٤٨ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪(VBR‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Windows 2000/Vista‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪*PMP SDC :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫● ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪) TXT :‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ 99,999‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫● ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ†‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺮﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ ‪ Windows 98) ANSI :Windows‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ(‪،‬‬‫‪Unicode / Unicode (Big-Endian) / UTF-8‬‬
‫)‪(Windows 2000 / XP‬‬
‫‪ANSI, Unicode (UTF-16) :Mac -‬‬
‫* ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Samsung Converter‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫† ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ PMP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪24‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.My Computer œ Removable Disk‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MP3‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ SDC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪PMP‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ TXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TEXT‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ”‪ ,“PMP” ,“MP3‬ﻭ”‪.“TEXT‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪25‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ PMP‬ﻭ‪ .TEXT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺟﻔﻆ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ )‪ً ٦٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ً ١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Converter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ˆ‬
‫Œ‬
‫‬
‫ˆ‬
‫‰‬
‫Š‬
‫‹‬
‫Œ‬
‫‬
‫Ž‬
‫‬
‫Ž‬
‫‬
‫‰‬
‫Š‬
‫‹‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪.(AVI, WMV, ASF, MPG [MPEG-1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮ؛ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎءﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ˆ‬
‫‰‬
‫Š‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Next‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫Š‬
‫‰‬
‫ˆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫‹‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫Š‬
‫‰‬
‫ˆ‬
‫ˆ‬
‫‰‬
‫Š‬
‫‹‬
‫Œ‬
‫‬
‫Ž‬
‫Ž‬
‫‬
‫Œ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫● ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪(Mac‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٠٫٣‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،PMP‬ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Samsung Converter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪.Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ”‪ ,“PMP” ,“MP3‬ﻭ”‪.“TEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MP3‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ SDC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪PMP‬‬
‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ TXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TEXT‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻞء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪30‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫)ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺗﺪﻳًﺎ ﻣﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ……………………………………………………… ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ …………………………………………… ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ………………………………………………… ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ …………………………………………… ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ………………………………………………… ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ………………………………………… ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٣٧ …………………………………………………… DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ………………………………………………… ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫………………………………………………………… ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ……………………………………………… ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫………………………………………………… ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ………………………………………… ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪33‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪..‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪2‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ“ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪34‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺨﻔﻲ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪OK :‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪ ،AUTO‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪36‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.DIS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪37‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ )‪.(MPEG-4.AVI‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[O‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪39‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪sdpa‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪40‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ………………………… ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ………………………………… ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ………………………………… ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪٥٣ …………………………… (EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ …………………………………… ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪٥٣ ……………………… (ACB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ……………………………………… ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ …………………………………… ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ …………………………………… ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ‪r‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ………………………………… ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫……………………………………… ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫………………… ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ……………………… ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬
‫……………………………………… ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٤٦ …………………………………… ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ …………………………………… ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ …………………………………… ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ………………… ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ……………………………………… ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ………………………………………… ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ………………………………… ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ …………………………………… ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ………………………………… ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫……………………………………… ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ………………………………… ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ………………………………………… ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ………………………………… ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ……………………… ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪vsdpaS‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،v‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪ :640 X 480‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :320 X 240‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ :800 X 592‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SDTV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ :3456 X 2592‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A٢‬‬
‫‪ :3456 X 2304‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A٣‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪.(٢:٣‬‬
‫‪ :3456 x 1944‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A٣‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪.(٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :2592 X 1944‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2048 X 1536‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A٥‬‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺍﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪sdpa‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪42‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪vsdpaS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [t‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻡ‬
‫● ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺗﻚ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ‪r‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪spa‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻻﻣﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪spaS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[F‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻞء‪:‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(ISO‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻀﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﺕ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻘﻌًﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪46‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪vdpa‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪“.‬‬
‫‪vdpa‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٨٠-٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٨٠-٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪sdpa‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪sdpa‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻤﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟ ٍﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪50‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻤﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪51‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺟﻮ ًﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪52‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫‪vdp‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪(٠‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(ACB‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻊ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.EV‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) AEB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ACB‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ِ‬
‫● ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ ACB‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.a‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪53‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪vdp‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪vdp‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪54‬‬
‫)ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻏﺎﺋﻢ(‬
‫)ﻧﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ :H‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ :L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻫﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻉ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪sp‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪:AEB‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭ‪ ACB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ VGA‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ,‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ٦) VGA‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ؛ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪56‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪vsdpa‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪.RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ RGB‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪57‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ :-) .‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ :+‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ………………………………………………………… ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ …………………………………………………………… ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ……………………………………………… ‪٦٧‬‬
‫…………………………………………………… ‪٦٠‬‬
‫…………………………………………………… ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ………………………………………………………… ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ……………………………………………………‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ …………………………………‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ……………………………………………‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪………………………………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫…………………………………………………… ‪٦٨‬‬
‫………………………………………………………… ‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ………………………………………… ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪٧٣ ………………………… (PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼ؛ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪60‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪.Smart Album‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ ،[Fn‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫● ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ٣‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪،Smart Album‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪Smart Album‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ(‬
‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [f‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪62‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪63‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺤﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﺒﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ ،[F] ،[M] ،[D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [o‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪64‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● |ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪66‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[M‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪67‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪˚90‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪) .MP3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪68‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪.RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ RGB‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪69‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ :-) .‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ :+‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(ACB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ؛ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء؛ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ؛ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) ACB‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.ACB‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :-‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ :+‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪70‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺘﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [D‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪71‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.DPOF 1.1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪72‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [o‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [F‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ………………………………………… ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ……………………………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ………………………………………………… ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ………………………………………………… ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ……………………………………… ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫………………………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ "_ _ _ _ __ _‪".‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [M‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪،‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB cable‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [M‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪AAA.mp3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[O‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[D‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[M‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫]‪[f‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪VBR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪ (VBR‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [D‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪3M :‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[o‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪BBB.sdc‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[O‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[D‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[M‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫]‪[t‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[o‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(*‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪)) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﻨﺎء ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ )‪ (.smi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Samsung Converter‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻄﻼ‪ً.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪1/12‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Samsung.txt‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[O‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[m‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[D‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٢/١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ*‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫]‪[M‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫]‪[F‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪:(American National Standards Institute) :ANSI‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ :Unicode‬ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ANSI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Notepad‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.(Windows‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ UVT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﺎﺩﻱ*‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫● ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ‪ ،*1‬ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ‪ :2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ :2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻛﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪) .MP3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪) .‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،*2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻻﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،*30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪(10‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ‬
‫‪UV‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :*5‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺺ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪(5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪UVT‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ………………………………………………… ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ …………………………………………… ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ……………………………………………………………… ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ……………………………………………………………… ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ……………………………………………………………… ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ………………………………………………………… ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫……………………………………………………… ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫……………………………………………………… ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ……………………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ …………………………………………………… ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ …………………………………………… ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ …………………………………………………… ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ……………………………………………………………… ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) .USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪84‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻔﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪) .‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ ،‬ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪85‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪) .‬ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ*‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪) .‬ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )‪.(DST‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪86‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 100SSCAM‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪.SDC10001‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪SDC10001‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.SDC19999‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 100SSCAM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.999SSCAM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪.9999‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ .(DCF‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) PAL‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ :(BDGHI‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﻠﺘﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،s‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ* ‪ 1 ,‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ 3 ,‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ*‪ 5 ,‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ 10 ,‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪87‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .DCF‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪88‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪89‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪,(Secure Digital) SD‬‬
‫‪,(Secure Digital High Capacity) SDHC‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺓﺮﻛﺍﺬﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻗﺎﻄﺑ ‪.(Multimedia Card) MMC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ(‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻱ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻱ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SDHC‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫‪٣٧٦‬‬
‫‪٥٤٦‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪٤٢٦‬‬
‫‪٦١١‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢٦٤‬‬
‫‪٥١٠‬‬
‫‪٧٤٤‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣٤٣‬‬
‫‪٦٣٧‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠‬‬
‫‪٥٣٢‬‬
‫‪٨٩٥‬‬
‫‪١٢١١‬‬
‫‪١,٧١٦‬‬
‫‪٢,٠٥٩‬‬
‫‪٢,٣٧٦‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪‘‘٩ ‘٣٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪90‬‬
‫‪15 FPS 20 FPS 30 FPS‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪‘‘٥٤ ‘٣٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪‘‘٢٤ ‘٤٧‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪‘‘٥٢ ‘٦٩‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪‘‘١٢ ‘٩٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪،a‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ،9M‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬
‫‪SLB-0937‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪900 mAh‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬
‫‪3.7 V‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻞء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪800 x 592‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪PMP‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪91‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪USB‬‬‫ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٥٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪92‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪93‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ d‬ﻭ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.s‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.(DCF‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻔﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪94‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ ١٫٠٢) ″٢٫٥/١‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ‪CCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫● ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫● ‪ ،AEB‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ٤/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ١٦ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ ٣X f = ٦٫٣ - ١٨٫٩‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ١١٤ - ٣٨ :‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪F-stop‬‬
‫)‪F3.5 (W) - F4.5 (T‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪ 1/3EV) 2EV±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪٥٫٠X - ١٫٠X :‬‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪)١٠٫٨X - ١٫٠X :‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٣٢٠٠ ،١٦٠٠ ،٨٠٠ ،٤٠٠ ،٢٠٠ ،١٠٠ ،٨٠ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٫٨٦) "٢٫٧‬ﺳﻢ(‪ ٢٣٠,٠٠٠ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF) TTL‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ AF ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ AF ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ AF ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﻞء‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ٠٫٣ :‬ﻡ ‪ ٣٫٨ -‬ﻡ )‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫● ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ٠٫٥ :‬ﻡ ‪ ٣٫٠ -‬ﻡ )‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )‪(T‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٨٠ -‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٨٠ -‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٥‬ﺳﻢ‪-‬ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ -‬ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪١‬ﺳﻢ‪٥-‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪95‬‬
‫● ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺋﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،H‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،L‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،DIS ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﺛﻠﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪AEB ،‬‬
‫● ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ 2 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 10 ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ MPEG-4 :‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ٢ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،(20 FPS) ٥٩٢ x ٨٠٠ :‬‬
‫‪،(30 FPS ،15 FPS) ٤٨٠ x ٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪(30 FPS ،15 FPS) ٢٤٠ x ٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪ ×٣‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪30 FPS، 20 FPS، 15 FPS :‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻀﻤﻦ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﺮ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫‪Smart Album‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫● ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺋﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،ACB :‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫● ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 196‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ(‬‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SDHC‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ(‬‫ ‪) MMC Plus‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ(‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪96‬‬
‫● ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.21, DPOF 1.1, :‬‬
‫‪PictBridge 1.0‬‬
‫● ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪AVI (MPEG-4) :‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪WAV :‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪3456 x 2592‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫‪٣٧٦‬‬
‫‪٥٤٦‬‬
‫‪3456 x 2304‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫‪٤٢٦‬‬
‫‪٦١١‬‬
‫‪3456 x 1944‬‬
‫‪٢٦٤‬‬
‫‪٥١٠‬‬
‫‪٧٤٤‬‬
‫‪2592 x 1944‬‬
‫‪٣٤٣‬‬
‫‪٦٣٧‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠‬‬
‫‪2048 x 1536‬‬
‫‪٥٣٢‬‬
‫‪٨٩٥‬‬
‫‪١,٢١١‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪١,٧١٦‬‬
‫‪٢,٠٥٩‬‬
‫‪٢,٣٧٦‬‬
‫‪PMP‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٢٠ -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) pin ٢٠‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ + ٤٠ mW‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫‪(١٦Ω) 40 mW‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ ٨٨ :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪LPF‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Layer 3) :‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ٣٢٠ ~ ٤٨ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪(VBR‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪SRS :‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪) Xvid MPEG-4 :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪(Converter‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) MPEG Layer 2 :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪(Converter‬‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ ×٣٢‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،TXT‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩,٩٩٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫● ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ٩٨ Windows) Windows ANSI :‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻩ(‪Unicode/Unicode (Big-Endian)/UTF-8 ،‬‬
‫‪,(Windows 2000/XP) Mac ANSI‬‬
‫)‪Unicode (UTF-16‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪،(٥ - ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٠ - ١‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪) NTSC, PAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪pin ٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ )‪(SLB-0937, 900 mAh‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪97‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ ١٩٫٤ x ٥٩٫٧ x ٩٢٫٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠,٧‬ﺟﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ - ٠‬ﻣﺜﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٪ ٨٥ - ٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Samsung Converter ،Samsung Master ،Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪98‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻼﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪99‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧٠ ,٥٣ ACB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ‪٨١ MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢٢ Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪٧١ DPOF‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪٨٥ Quick View‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥١‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪Samsung Converter‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٦١ Smart Album‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪٩٠ MMC‬‬
‫‪٩٠ SD‬‬
‫‪٩٠ SDHC‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪100‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪١٣ MENU‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺑﺤﺎﺭ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٥ ،١٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻞء ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٤٦ ISO‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٨٥ AF‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪101‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ‪٨٧ AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪٥٦ (AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٣٧ DIS‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٣٧ DIS‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪٧٠ ،٥٣ (ACB‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪٤٧ (AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٩ Mac‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٢ Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪102‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ /http://www.samsungcamera.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ CE‬ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
‫)‪(EC‬‬
Download PDF

advertising